Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. 3 . Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical panels. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and piping. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. electrical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing engineering workflows. such as duct. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. Add more detailed modelling elements.

Metric file names have an _m suffix. You do not design entire systems. However. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. to provide a richer and more finished design. such as templates and families. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. Create schedules. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you learn where the training files are located. So. For example. For example. Create detail views. After completing each exercise. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. When you open a training file. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. NOTE Depending on your installation. however. On the Contents tab. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. When you install the training files as instructed. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Contact your CAD manager for more information. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . and sheets to document the project. templates. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. views. is located and accessed in the training files location. your Training folder may be in a different location.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. annotations. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. In this exercise. and tags. when you add ductwork. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you can choose to save your work. as well as how to open and save them. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. the Open dialog displays. click ➤ Save As. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and you can open any supported file type. select the folder in which to save the new file. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. For File name.rvt) is selected. and click the Training Files icon. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. For Files of type. double-click Imperial or Metric. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Save. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. verify that Project Files (*.rvt and make changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. a list of file types displays. you are prompted to save the changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 . For example. 4 Click the training file name. if you open settings. 3 In the right pane.rvt. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. and click Open. 8 If you have made changes. enter the new file name. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. scroll down. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

drawing sheets. the door retains this relationship to the partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. the operation of the software is parametric. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You learn the terminology. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. 2D and 3D view. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. quantities. every drawing sheet. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. drawings. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the hierarchy of elements. and plans. If you move the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. schedules. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and phases when you need it. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the parameter is one of association or connection. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. sections. As you work in drawing and schedule views. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the floor or roof remains connected. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. In the Revit MEP model.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. hence. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. scope. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. ■ ■ 7 .

sprinklers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sinks. They display in relevant views of the design. filled regions. For example. sinks. ducts. Datum elements help to define project context. sprinklers. and electrical panels. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. boilers. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Examples include detail lines. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. tags. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. boilers. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. dimensions. ducts. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . dimensions.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. levels. tags. walls and ceilings are hosts. grids. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and electrical panels. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. They help to describe or document the design. For example. When you change something. and 2D detail components.

schedules. and types. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. floors. If you can draw. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. In Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. North . for example. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. views of the project. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Most often. To place levels. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. or bottom of foundation. programming is not required. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. from geometry to construction data. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. first floor. However. By using a single project file. and so forth). and ceilings.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. top of wall. Project: In Revit MEP. families. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . elevation views. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you must be in a section or elevation view. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. such as roofs. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Often. The project file contains all information for the building design. In other cases. you can explicitly control them. This information includes components used to design the model. section views. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. For example. and drawings of the design.

and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. pipes. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. each in-place family contains only a single type. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. However. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and similar graphical representation. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. showing. For example. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . You can also display several project views at one time. Unlike system and standard component families. A type can be a specific size of a family. hiding. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. Then experiment with them. With a few clicks. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A type can also be a style. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include ducts. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and wires. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. System families can be transferred between projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. or layer the views to see only the one on top. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Type: Each family can have several types. For example. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). identical use. For example. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category.

Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.

data and systems. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. When working on the Modify tab. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and for switching views. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for running analysis on the current design.. architect-specific tools. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. select the tool first. project and system parameters. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and settings. then select what you want to modify. tools used for editing existing elements. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010..

when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. To keep a panel expanded. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides access to common tools. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. displays frequently used tools. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides requested information. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . closes the application menu (double-click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. By default. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).

. such as Export and Publish. select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Export) On the application menu. select a file to open. click.... Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Save As) export the current drawing.

provides views including Default 3D.On the application menu.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. annotation. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. publish the current project. or template file. (Print) access product and license information. Camera. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Licensing) close the file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. to. but is not enabled by default. (Publish) print the current drawing. To enable or disable a tool item.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. click. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. saves a current project... annotation. or template file. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. and Walkthrough.

workshared components. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. However. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Starting with the most recent command. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. repeat the command. check the Status Bar. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. when you switch to another editing mode. In addition. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. This displays the command history in a list. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. or the Family Editor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. When you are highlighting an element or component. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. displaying the same information. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Modify. To hide the Status Bar. Clipboard. Group. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). When you are using a command. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. To show the Status Bar again.To undo or redo a series of operations. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

for example. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. click (Modify). use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. On the Quick Access toolbar. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Place a Wall.To cancel or exit the current command. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . select one or more elements of the same category. To change existing elements to a different type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. In the following steps. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. click Training Files. 1 Click ➤ Open. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. There are several ways to access zoom options. For example. After you are familiar with these tasks. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view.

9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. this is referred to as a crossing selection. on the Navigation bar.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Modifying the View | 19 . click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 6 Click in the drawing area. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. In the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click . 5 Click Zoom To Fit. To modify or add snap increments. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

As you move the mouse.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press ESC. For more information about SteeringWheels. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Click and drag to orbit the design. and click tin the Options dialog. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . ➤ Options. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 11 Click and hold the mouse button.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. Similar controls. These are the drag controls. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. as shown. display along the ends. and open Level 2 .Design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. referred to as shape handles. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. and select the duct.HVAC Plan . called drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. bottoms. 2 Enter ZR. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Small blue dots. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.

4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. or press CTRL+Z. Move. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 6 On the Undo menu. All changes you make to a project are tracked. select the first item in the list.3 Click and drag the bottom control.

8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. In this case. 11 With the duct already selected. The duct is moved to the new position. as shown. for example. such as Move and Copy. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. and drag it to the left as shown. Some commands. click to specify the starting position. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. 10 Move the cursor to the right.

13 To end a command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Press ESC twice. Select Mechanical .Return. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. such as the Modify Ducts command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. For example. Click OK. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands.Supply. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

6 Click OK. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You can either select a template from the template library. and click Open. and geometry from the starting template. under Create new.rte template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. use copy/monitor. such as coordination review and interference checking. settings. under Template file. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 2 In the New Project dialog. In that case. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. 5 In the New Project dialog. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. Finally. the default building levels and standard views. such as the default project units and settings. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. select Project. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. click Training files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You can choose from several templates. and modify system settings. link files. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. system families. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. create and manage views. click Browse. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and loadable families. 27 . such as ducts and pipes. you learn how to start a project from a template. New projects inherit all the families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.

15 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can select it now. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. review the construction materials listed. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Click OK. For Location. select Manchester. create another new project using the Construction template. ■ For Building Construction. In the Choose Template dialog. and open North. NH. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. for City. Click Cancel. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. When you select the material. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules.rte template and click Open. ■ ■ Under Create new. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click (Browse). click Edit. For example. (Browse). navigate to Imperial Templates.7 In the Project Browser. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. under Energy Analysis. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). To maintain office standards and reduce rework. select Level 1. for Energy Data. select School or University. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click OK twice. select Project template. 10 Using the same method. 8 In the drawing area. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click Browse. If you want to use a template other than the default. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial.

rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. and demand factors for electrical systems. for 3 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Holding CTRL. and fire protection systems. under Duct Settings. 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. click Rectangular. plumbing. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and 5 1/2". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. power distribution systems. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 23 In the left pane. 26 In the right pane. 10 1/2". For Categories. 25 In the left pane. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. under Duct Settings. 22 In the right pane. for 3 1/2". click Round. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. piping. 33 Click OK. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Wiring. click Sizes. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 24 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark.rfa and click Open. select Views. Click OK twice. select Identity Data. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK. under Pipe Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and 12 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 4 1/2". 5 1/2". for 3/4". 11 1/2".

Origin to Origin. Linking Projects In this exercise. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Family and Type. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. To enable this coordination. For Then by. For Sort by. families. select Sub-Discipline. under Create new.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. select Project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. For Then by.rvt. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select View Name. click Training. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 38 Close the file. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 4 In the New Project dialog. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Browse. under Template file. From the Positioning list. 5 Click OK. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 2 In the New Project dialog. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. In addition. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Associated Level. select Auto . you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. and groups that are contained in a project. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Click Open. sheets.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and click OK twice. click My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. Load. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. click the My Library icon. 15 Under Library Name.11 In the Places dialog. ➤ Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. templates. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. or families. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Save. and click (Browse). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open.

and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click the Spelling tab. such as bump maps. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. If you want to relocate this path. 12 Create a new project using the default template. click Edit. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 14 Click in the drawing area. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 In the text editor. 9 In the text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Select My Library. custom color files. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 27 Click OK. 3 Under Settings. and decal image files. select Ignore words in uppercase. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click OK. view the current path. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 20 Click ➤ Options. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click Places. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter sheetmtl-Cu. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 21 On the File Locations tab. If you work in a large office. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. This path is determined during installation. specify the new location here. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

18 Click ➤ Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.rte. In this exercise. click Restore Defaults. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 24 In the Options dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. work with snapping turned off. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click OK. click Browse. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 22 In the text editor.17 In the Spelling dialog. 25 Close the file without saving it. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. under Dimension Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.. click the Spelling tab. You can turn snap settings on and off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Edit. you modify snap increments. click OK. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . under Template file. 20 Under Settings. you modify snap settings. click File menu ➤ Save. click Close. delete sheetmtl-CU. and enter 1 . click Training Files. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. As you zoom in and out within a view. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 4 In the New Project dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 19 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. 23 In the text editor. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ .

click OK. use the wheel button on your mouse. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. If it does not. and move the cursor to the right. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. such as ZO to zoom out. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If you do not have a wheel button. 10 On the Options Bar.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom out until it does so. For example. enter SM. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. This is the increment that you added previously. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. TIP To zoom while sketching. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. deselect Chain. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 .

and the wall edges. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 19 Enter SM. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. with or without saving it. 25 Click OK. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. the midpoint. 26 Close the file.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and move the cursor to the right. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and specify the wall endpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the command is only active for one click of the mouse.. and delete the value 1’ . Notice that snapping is once again active. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 .

44 .

it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you first configure the linked architectural model. you design a mechanical system for an office building. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. As you create the mechanical system. After finishing each exercise. you will understand the process. However. In this exercise. duct system and a hydronic piping system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. methodology. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. This system consists of a cooling tower. By following the recommended workflow. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In this lesson. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you first plan the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present. go to http://www. and then you create a plenum level. water source heat pump (WSHP). To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. 45 . you can choose to save your work. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. At the end of the tutorial.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. roof. ceilings. In this section. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. under Constraints. NOTE When working with a linked file. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Room Bounding. Next. click Training Files. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you add a level for plenums. click to select it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. not in the MEP training file. and after the linked model highlights. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume.

6 In the Project Browser. and enter Level 2 Plenum. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Preparing Spaces | 47 . those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 16 Press Esc. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and in the Plan View Types dialog. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans.MEP. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 9 On the Draw panel. For Offset. and double-click West . ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. enter 8'. and click OK. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. The new level is placed. Click Plan View Types.

for Default View Template. and for Offset. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and click Properties.Plenum. Under Extents. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for View Scale. In this exercise. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 20 In the Project Browser. select MEP . enter 0. Under View Depth. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. for View Range. NOTE After finishing each exercise. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. However. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. In this exercise. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. For View Classification.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. For Sub-Discipline. enter an Offset of 1' 0". click Edit. Under Identity Data. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . right-click Level 2 Plenum. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you place spaces in areas of the building model. and click Apply Default View Template. In the next exercise. and then place spaces in various types of areas. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Top. ■ Click OK twice.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. For Cut plane. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. select Level Above (Level 3). select Plenum Plan. for Level. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you can choose to save your work. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select Design.

2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. For Space. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and ceilings). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. click Training Files. For Upper Limit.rvt. select New. For Offset. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . walls. select Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. select Horizontal. For (Tag Location). ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. Placing Spaces | 49 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.

13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. ensuring coordination between the files. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. For Name. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 14 In the drawing area. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .7 Click to place the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Library. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 9 Select the space. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. for Number. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

For Offset. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. For Upper Limit. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.

24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then split the space using a space separation line.

Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 3. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. click Training Files. enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. and for Offset.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. for Upper Limit. and then press Esc.

and scroll to the newly placed space. double-click the space name. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. which was numbered 219Q. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. as shown.7 In the Project Browser. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. In the schedule. enter Corridor. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. change the space number to 216A. 10 Using the same method. and press Enter. 9 In the floor plan.

The new space is numbered correctly (216B). with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Using the method learned previously.15 Press Esc twice.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. If necessary. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. you place a space in a chase. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

enter 225PC. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. For Number. and then click OK. for Upper Limit. for Name. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. right-click. enter Chase. For Offset. In the plan view. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. On the Options Bar. select the space. 6 Enter VG. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and click Element Properties. For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. select Roof Level. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Level 3. 12 Click in the section view. select Interior and Reference. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. enter 4'. click in the chase area to place the space.4 Press Esc. expand Spaces. Under Identity Data. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 0. 10 In the plan view.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. All spaces in the view are tagged. floors. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 17 Type ZF.Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Space Tag With Volume. ceilings. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . under Loaded Tags. In the next exercises. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. and click OK. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and maximize the view.Space Plan. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. it is automatically added to the Default zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . click View ➤ Zones. which removes the space from the Default zone.Zoning is highlighted.rvt. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. under Spaces. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). In the left pane of the Open dialog.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. After a space is placed in an area. To display space reference lines. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. click Reference. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click Training Files. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. select Computer Lab 222. Next. As you do this. double-click 121 Cafeteria. click Training Files. you assign spaces to a zone. and click Finish Editing Zone. under Spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. the Edit Zone tab displays. indicating that it’s the active view. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Instruction 221. The graphic in the System Browser updates. The Zone tool is active. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and a new zone is created. under Energy Analysis. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 4 In the drawing area. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and modify the zone properties. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that the space is occupiable. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. select Occupiable.5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. and click OK. and Electrical 220 spaces. you assign spaces to zones in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference.

Expand HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 5 With the drawing area active. select HVAC Zones.In the System Browser. Click OK. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. you need to activate the zone visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Instruction. To view the zone in the drawing area.

for Name. You activated zone visibility in the views. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).West . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. enter 2 . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Area B. 11 Close the System Browser. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Training Files. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.West . under Identity Data. In this exercise. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. To display space reference lines. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Finish Editing Zone. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Spaces. and verify the zone in the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. expand 2 . 9 In the System Browser. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected.Zoning view to activate it.Zoning floor plan.5 Click in the Level 1 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . zoom out. 8 In the Level 1 . 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click in the Level 2 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 15 Press Esc. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 9 With the Add Space tool active. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 1/2". select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Select Attached End.

enter Lounge . 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. for Name Value. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In this exercise. Front. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. space. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. click the corner where the Top.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. on the ViewCube. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .East. and zone information. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. double-click the zone tag. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.rvt. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning view. double-click Level 1 . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. you verify the building. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. click Training Files.

Using the Highlight tool. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you isolate the space. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. Next. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. verify that Wireframe is selected. click (Isolate). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. and select 109 Lounge.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Click (Highlight). ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . With 109 Lounge selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.

and click OK. and then click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation.■ On the Details tab. verify that <Building> is selected. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. For People. Next. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Electrical Loads. and in the People dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 109 Lounge. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For Construction Type. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. ■ ■ ■ Next. click . and then click OK. scroll down in the left pane. click . select 1_South_Lounge. select Lounge/Recreation.

Next. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. cooling air temperature. This indicates the heating set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that 74. floors.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. Below the list of spaces and zones. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. For Cooling Information. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the cooling set point.00 °F : 54. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. roofs. verify that 70. 12 Using the methods learned previously. For Heating Information. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. and humidification set point. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. click (Shading). heating air temperature. and air changes per hour.00 °F : 90. This indicates the outdoor air per person. and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. the zone information displays for the selected zone.

notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. For Name. Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. open MEP . select Plenum. select Plenum. Click OK. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Number. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 15 In the Project Browser. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level 3. enter 0. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. click Cancel. Under Energy Analysis. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. enter 212P.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. For Offset.

3 In the Instance Properties dialog.Space Plan. click Training Files. for Energy Data. enter 03101. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. For Location. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you verified building. On the Place tab. for City. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.rvt. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. under Energy Analysis. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select space Plenum 212P. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. NH. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. space. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. double-click Level 2 . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. select School or University. In this exercise. click in the Value field. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and zone information. is selected. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . verify that Manchester. For Postal Code. and verify that the space has replaced the void.

select Specified. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and enter 50 sq. select space Library 219. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Specified. both. and then click . and click OK. 8 In the drawing area. enter 150 Btu/h. and click OK. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that <Building> is specified. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. For People. For Sliver Space Tolerance. ft. enter 200 Btu/h. right-click. verify that Occupiable is selected. ■ On the Weather tab. Select Area per person. For Latent. for Building Service.Audio Visual. For Sensible.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Export Complexity. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Building Construction. for Values. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Ground Plane. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. Click OK twice. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. click in the Value column. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. If. this option adjusts the times automatically. and click Element Properties. In order to select a space. for Values. select Library . For Condition Type. click Edit. verify that New Construction is selected. or neither. For Space Type. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. verify that Level 1 is selected. a cooling load. For Project Phase. you need to select this option. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. under Volume Computations. select Heated and cooled. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that 1' 0" is specified.

select Actual. Select the space associated with the warning. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. For Location. NH. Click OK twice. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. For Electrical Loads. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and can be modified here. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click Information). Revit MEP stores this information as project information. for Values. verify that <Building> is specified. for Values. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click Edit. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 12 Click the Details tab. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You should correct the space error in the building model. verify that School or University is selected. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Building Service. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. click Calculate. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . You have verified the building information.■ ■ ■ Click OK. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and click OK. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. select 219 Library. select Actual. Under Power. Next. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. and under Heating Information. verify that Manchester. There should be no warnings displayed. For Building Construction. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). is specified. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.

click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 19 In the drawing area. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. 15 Review the loads report for project. For Color Scheme. and zone information for the building model. or zone information. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 16 After you review the loads report. 17 In the loads report. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click Training Files. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review.rvt. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. select 219 Library. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.Space Plan. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. In this exercise. under Energy Analysis. and a loads report displays. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Zones. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 21 Click OK. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. or make any changes to the model. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. space. 3 In the drawing area. weather. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.

select Tonnage Range. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select the color scheme legend. and click OK.5 Zoom in to the legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. The new scheme displays in the view. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. in 1-ton increments. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

Click OK.rvt. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select New Construction. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . click Training Files. In the next exercise. for Select available fields from. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Schedule building components. more category options are available. For Name.12 Close the file with or without saving it. select Spaces.Space Fill is the active view. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. enter Space Airflow Schedule. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Phase. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. If you select Show categories from all disciplines.

For Formula. In the Schedule Properties dialog. In the Calculated Value dialog. For Discipline. enter Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. Click OK. select Airflow Delta.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select HVAC. and click OK. and then click . ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Air Flow. Select Formula. ■ Click Calculated Value. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level. For Type. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. click (Browse). For Then by. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Header. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. and Blank line. select Not Between. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. for Formula. For Fields. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Level. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. In the Fields dialog. enter . Select Ascending. select Number. and then click Conditional Format.■ Under Available fields.

■ The schedule displays. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the next lesson. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. and click OK. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. Click OK twice. For Background Color. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . a view opens that contains the selected space. select red. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. right-click to access schedule properties. verify that Show is highlighted.■ ■ ■ For Value. In this exercise. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click the color swatch. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the Color dialog. Under Conditions to Use. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. In later exercises. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel.

78 .

and work with the airflow schedule.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. 79 . you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. As you place the air terminals. After system creation. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you will create supply air systems. Then. you modify air terminal parameters. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).

Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. click Training Files. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Also. and then press Esc to end the command. click Place on Face. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 17 Move the cursor down. select the diffuser. The schedule updates with the new flow data. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 13 On the Options Bar.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . and press Enter.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. verify that Constrain is cleared. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . and select Supply Diffuser . for Flow. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Rectangular Face Round Neck . as shown. type 12. the hosted elements are updated as well. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. If the host element is modified or moved. 9 On the Placement panel. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. enter 425 CFM. and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

Next. and then press Esc. 28 On the Placement tab. 24 In the Open dialog. 22 In the drawing area. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag.rfa.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. clear Leader. click Place on Face. select one of the diffusers. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and click Open. 21 On the Options Bar.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 Place 2 diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 25 In the drawing area. as shown. As you place the return diffusers. click Yes. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.

as shown. 32 In the Project Browser. under Other. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. for Reference. select Strong Reference. select one of the return diffusers. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 .Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. 31 In the alert dialog. Level. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. click Yes. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. 44 Zoom in to space 115. for Constraints ➤ Offset. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click the Level 1 line. ■ ■ For the end point. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

When you highlight a space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. You then create the logical connection between the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. right-click the title. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. After creating the logical connection. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. However. the space crossing lines display.HVAC Plan . 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including energy analysis.Press Esc. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files.rvt. and click View ➤ Systems. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Design is highlighted. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. As you add diffusers to systems. and Flow value. 6 Keep the System Browser open. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. On the Options Bar. 15 Click Cancel. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. the number of elements is updated. 12 In the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. review the Number of Elements. Connect Into. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. System Name. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab.

In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 22 Click OK. for System Name. 25 Click OK. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. the air terminals are the children. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. which updates the name in the System Browser. for Mark. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.17 Using the method learned previously. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Click OK. In this exercise. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Rename the system Next. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Identity Data. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. and the system connects them. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties.

click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Also. In this case. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. select the upper left diffuser. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). which provides various layout tools.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the Network type provides several solutions. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A Generate Layout tab displays. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 In the drawing area.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.HVAC Plan. select Network. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and display solution 1. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. for Solution Type.

WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 9 On the Generate Layout panel.Round. For Duct Type. Select Branch. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. For Offset. as shown. enter 9' 10 1/2". enter 3'. you’ll get an error in a later step. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. click Modify. For Flex Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Click OK. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Duct Type.7 On the Options Bar. For Offset. click Settings.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . or offset elevations are incorrect. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. For example. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. as is the elbow itself. Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.11 Click Finish Layout.

press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. fittings. select By View. and click OK. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. a disconnection exists. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click OK. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Usually. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Using a flow-based color scheme. but not all values are used in this view. The first time you press Tab. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. highlight a segment of the main duct. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. for Values Displayed. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. under Graphics. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.Flow. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. for Color Scheme.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. If the entire network does not highlight. and equipment.

Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select one of the diffusers in the system. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Flow. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. and press Enter. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . for Schemes. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and on the Options Bar.Airflow. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select the WSHP. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select the color scheme legend. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical .Velocity.

press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system.08 in-wg/100ft. The ductwork and fittings are updated. select Friction. Select the upper segment of main duct. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Branch Sizing. select Calculated Size Only. Under Constraints. and then click to select it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and drag it to the right. and select 16". Click OK. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Restrict Height. highlight a segment of the duct. and enter . Select Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. click Cancel.

Use the information that displays (flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . pressure.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. static pressure. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using this tool. and pressure loss. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).

You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. click Training Files. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.NOTE As you inspect a system.rvt. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. also known as the critical path. 35 Click Finish. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select the WSHP.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click to specify the end of the main duct.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click the corner where the Top. select 9' 10 1/2". 11 On the Options Bar. select the top right diffuser. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 14 In the Project Browser. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 15 On the ViewCube. NOTE When drawing duct. Front.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . double-click MEP . and click Draw Duct. for Offset. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.3D MEP. right-click the connector grip.

Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Also. 19 In the drawing area. the color fill indicates the flow value.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. 22 Using the same method. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. The ductwork is automatically created.

zoom in to the open end of the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. You can ignore the warning. and select the top left diffuser. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. and then click Modify. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 30 Press Esc twice.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click to select it.

select a segment of the main duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Constraints. 40 Using the same method. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Airflow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. such as a plenum. and then click OK. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click OK. clear Restrict Height.

or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Then. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. 109 . In this lesson. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Create return and supply piping systems.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.

you place mechanical equipment. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. click Training Files. on level 3 of the building model.

in corridor 328. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and select WSHP . verify that Wall faces is selected. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.High Efficiency . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 7 On the Options Bar.Left Return . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.HVAC Plan .Horizontal . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . indicating that it’s the active view.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. as shown.Design is highlighted.2-6 Tons .

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.8 Click the corridor wall face. and in the Type Selector. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the top edge of the WSHP. and enter 2'. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. verify that the WSHP is still selected. as shown. as shown.

above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump.14 Click Modify. for Water Flow. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Offset. enter 12 GPM. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. Click OK. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 9'. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 2 WSHPs.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including flow and pressure.21 Click Modify. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. you create the return and supply piping systems. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Create the logical connection between the system components.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Mech 330).Design is highlighted. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. but without a corresponding system. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. where it is easier to review the information. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . analyses cannot be performed. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System | 115 . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Unlike logical connections (systems). Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Piping.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. You can create pipes to connect system components. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading.HVAC Plan . and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.

Notice that on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. This display indicates that the system is selected. select the 2 WSHPs. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. 10 On the Options Bar. for System Name. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. while pressing Ctrl. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.In the System Browser. Therefore. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and the Edit System tool is not active. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . As you assign equipment to systems. 12 In the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select the boiler.

double-click Roof . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. under Design ➤ HVAC . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.13 Click Finish Editing System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 17 On the Options Bar. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.HVAC Plan . You have created the hydronic return system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and select the cooling tower.

Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 29 Right-click CHWS. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click Expand All. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.22 In the Select Connector dialog. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 23 Close the roof plan view. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. and click Select. and bypasses the cooling tower. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 25 Select the boiler. In cooling mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. In heating mode. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. indicating the logical connection. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and click OK. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 26 Click Finish Editing System.

enter 18 GPM.In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. you can view several parameters. expand Piping. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click Properties. for Water Flow. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click OK. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. under Mechanical. 32 In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. You also manually modify the layout path as required.

press Tab to highlight the system.HVAC Plan . select Mechanical Equipment. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Click OK. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. click Check None. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. then the Select a System dialog displays. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 5 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .rvt. click Training Files. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Mech 330). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and click OK. you can place the cursor over a system component. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select CHWR.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and click to select it. A system preview displays in red. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. the boiler. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan.

It does not reference the architecture. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 1' 6''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. duct. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Cancel. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. click Settings. select Perimeter. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. structural beams. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. or architectural components. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.

select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. to display the path with thinner lines. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and the flow for the other is 12. 17 Optionally. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the flow for one WSHP is 18. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 19 In the drawing area. and press Tab 3 times.

24 Press Esc. and access its instance properties. under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 22 Select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 23 Under Mechanical. and click OK. and click OK. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left.

124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Logically. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Next. which propagates flow throughout the system. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the Number of Elements is now 8. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 27 On the System Tools panel. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. On the Options Bar. you physically close the CHWR loop.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Edit System. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.HVAC Plan . 32 Click Finish Editing System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 38 Using the same method. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. select a WSHP. and click Cancel. 35 Using the drag control. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. access its instance properties. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.

enter 1' 6''.40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Slope. For Inset. and then click OK. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 0''/12''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click Settings. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type.

as shown.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. In a later exercise. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 47 In the drawing area. 48 While pressing Ctrl. (Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .

To create the piping system. or offset elevations are incorrect. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system.50 Using the same method. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select a different layout solution. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. Add piping to close the supply loop. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping.

4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. as shown.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . click Training Files. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ 3D Views. As you work in the training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the return pipes are magenta. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. double-click 3D HVAC Building.

7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping.

■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. select the boiler.

Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the return pipe riser. 12 In the 3D view. and click OK. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click Draw Pipe. The connections are automatically created.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the boiler. and the lower one is secondary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 13 In the plan view. 11 In the Select Connector dialog.

15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 2'. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.In a plan view. enter 1' . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.7''. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and you select 1 connector.

NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and select it. As you place piping runs that are close together. 19 In the plan view. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and the appropriate fittings are created. 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. as shown.

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 27 Move the cursor to the right. and click the minus symbol. 29 If necessary.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and when the connector point displays. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. click to connect to the pump. you select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe.

for Offset. enter 4'.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc.

these pipe connections were created automatically.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

and click Draw Pipe. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe. type 1'.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. ■ Move the cursor down. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. for Offset. and press Enter. enter 9' 6''.

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.37 Click Modify. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . you validate the flow through the system. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. and click Element Properties. Next. You now have a closed loop system.

Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 42 Click OK. 41 Using the same method. under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. notice that under Mechanical. In the Instance Properties dialog. select the cooling tower. Connect the cooling tower Next. 43 Press Esc. right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . The flow is being propagated through the piping. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . view the properties for the secondary pump. and click Element Properties. for Cooling Water Flow. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). When you create the pumps in parallel. and click OK. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. the value is 0 GPM. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. as shown. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 40 Click Cancel.50 or 50% of the Flow.

49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and is heated by the boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. click Training Files. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When the valve is open. and close the dialog. select the cooling tower.rvt. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. and select Ball Valve . The bypass valve is closed by default.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Adding Valves | 143 . as shown. 8 Press Esc twice. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 4 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Using the same method. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 12 Select Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. place another Ball Valve .

19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . In heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 20 Select the bypass valve. right-click.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve . and click OK. under Mechanical. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and click Element Properties.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.22 Using the method you just learned. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. Initially.rvt. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. click Training Files. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.

4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. for Schemes. select Pipe Color Fill . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size.Flow. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Pipe Color Fill . Sizing Pipe | 147 . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.

148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Under Constraints. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and enter 2. 13 Press Esc. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.25 FT/100ft. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select And. Click OK. select Friction. and click to select the branch. enter 5 FPS.

Inspecting the System | 149 . click Training Files. select a different layout solution. pressure. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and double-click 3D HVAC Building. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. or manually modify the pipe. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspecting the System In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Using the System Inspector.Design ➤ 3D Views. Either relocate the system components. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.

Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. An inspection flag reports the section number.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. as required. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and pressure information including pressure loss. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. flow.

9 Using the same method.89 psi. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 10 Click Finish.67 psi. inspect Section 6 again. and to size pipe. and the Pressure Loss is 1. as shown. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.88 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and click OK.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. In this exercise. targeting those systems that need attention. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. the Static Pressure is 7. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. select 90° F. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them.

the pipe is associated with that system. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. double-click Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For example. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. and click View. 9 Right-click CHWS. 4 In the System Browser. After you have assigned all components to systems. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the Systems titlebar. and double-click Level 3 . click Training Files. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. 7 In the System Browser.Design. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. If you place components without assigning them to a system.HVAC Plan . Warnings display. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. As you learned when placing components. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. thus assigning the components to a system. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).Design. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. and for pipe sizing. After you assign components to a system. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components.

HVAC Plan . You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. 13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 12 In the System Browser. right-click Hydronic Return. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Unassigned folder.Design floor plan. and confirm unassigned system components. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Expand All.TIP If you have multiple views open. otherwise. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. click Close. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.

154 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Click New Correction Factor. click (Open). and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. enter 1. ■ ■ For Factor.Wire Sizes. Select Correction Factor. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Click OK. select Copper. You also add a wiring type. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. enter THHN. distribution systems. For Temperature Rating. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature. select Wiring Types. For Material. select 75. and demand factors that are applied in the design. As you place components and create circuits.04.rvt. select Copper. click Training Files. expand Wiring . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 90. ■ ■ For Material. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . speeding up the design phase. wiring.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK three times.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. First. Create power loads. Create a panel schedule. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Then. 167 . Balance wire sizes and breaker service. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Use the System Browser to check your design.

Under Scheme Definition. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Click OK.Lighting Color Fill view is open. click Training Files.00 fc. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click (Open). Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .rvt. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select the color legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. select Average Estimated Illumination. for Basic Colors.00 fc. select the color for Less Than 20. In the Color dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By using orange as the color for this range. for the Spaces Category. select Orange. You can create additional color schemes.

17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range is satisfied. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The red field will clear once the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. 13 Click the Level 2 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 8 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . zoom to space Library 219. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.7 In the Project Browser. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.Lighting Ceiling plan. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.

the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 25 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click to place the fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 19 Press ESC to end the command. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 23 Click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. the fixtures will move accordingly.

select the 3 fixtures. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 .NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple. 28 In the drawing area.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog.277V.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

277V. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select Multiple Alignment. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar. The lighting delta is satisfied. 42 In the drawing area.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.

45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.rvt. click (Open). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the next exercise.

scroll to view space space Library 219. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 2 Tile the views as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill plan. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

00 lm. select T5 [HO].00 VA. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. select Xenon and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. enter F15. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. enter . specify 15000. enter . ■ Click OK twice. and click OK. In the Name dialog. select Luminous Flux. Under Identity Data. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Photometrics. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.93. ■ Click Apply. ■ Under Photometrics. for Apparent Load.85. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . click the value for Light Loss Factor. Under Photometrics. In the Select File dialog. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Lamp. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Initial Color. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Color Preset. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. select 463T5_S. enter 162.277V and click OK. for Type Mark. click the value for Initial Intensity. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.ies and click Open.

12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures.277V. and for Category. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 10 In the Filter dialog.

15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.Press Delete. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. junction boxes. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open). Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 183 .Press Delete. and receptacles to your design. Junction Boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. In the next exercise. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. you add switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch.277V. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.

Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. The element type Junction Boxes . Select Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 . 12 In the Load Family dialog. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Junction Boxes.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad. Placing Switches.rfa and click Open. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 9 Press ESC to end the command.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.

Under Electrical. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Press ESC to end the command. note the Number of Poles is 1. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 21 In the drawing area. Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219. for Level 2 . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice. enter JB-1NL.Offset. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 15 Select the junction box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter 9’0”. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. NOTE When entering values.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. In the Type Properties dialog.

Space Name. 23 In the System Browser. 24 For any column.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Voltage. 26 In the System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Expand Electrical. Select Size. and Number of Elements. Click OK. Space Number. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand General. Distribution System. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Placing Switches. Select Load. NOTE If necessary. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Receptacles | 187 . Junction Boxes.

35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser.

and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Junction Boxes. 38 Select the receptacle. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down.

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 .

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

rvt. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 2 In the drawing area. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). click Training Files.

for Max.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 14 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A. 8 Select the panelboard. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . for Distribution System. Click OK. enter PP-2B. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 120/208 Wye.Loads. select 480/277 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter 20. for Distribution System. For Panel Name. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 15 On the Options Bar.

for Max. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 23 In the Filter dialog.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter LP-2B. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter 20. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Loads. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. For Panel Name. and for Category. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. click Check None. #1 Pole Breakers. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. zoom to space Instruction 221.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

38 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. click (Open). Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. and for Category. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. except without wire. Click OK. 41 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Click OK. enter 2. select Wires. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Hot Conductors.Loads.

Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Expand Electrical. and Voltage Drop are selected. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. and then expand circuit 1. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. click Training Files. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and verify that Load. ■ 16 In the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 13 In the System Browser. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Voltage. Click OK. Rating.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Distribution System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.

Click OK. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 30 Close the System Browser. under Electrical. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 With the junction box still selected. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221.

Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. enter FR4. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. click Edit Type. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 40 Click OK twice. note the label parameters and click Cancel. click below the first one to place it. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click Yes.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 47 In the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. under Identity Data. Click Tags. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

select Break. select Lighting Fixture Tags. Next you create a switch system.rfa. Click OK. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. enter a comma.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. For Circuit Number. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. and for Category. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 52 In the Save As dialog. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 56 In the Filter dialog. and click Apply. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. click Check None. for File Name. Click OK. Click Save. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Deselect Break and for Suffix.

12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. under Electrical Lighting. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. click (Open). 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. for Switch ID.

16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Lighting. enter b. Click OK. for switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

lighting. select the PP-2B panel. 7 In space Electrical 220. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open).26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Power Loads | 207 . Click OK. and for Category. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. select Electrical Fixtures. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.rvt. click Check None. 2 In the drawing area. Circuits are used for power. 4 In the Filter dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and data systems. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.

10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 19 Click OK. and click Open. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. enter 2. select Wiring. under Electrical . and in the right pane. 13 Select the wire again. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Element Properties. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 In the Load Family dialog. for Hot Conductors. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Loads. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires.rfa. and in the drawing area. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. and click to select the circuit. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. as shown. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.

28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. click the connector of the first receptacle.26 Press Delete. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 In space Instruction 221.

rvt. 3 In the Electrical space. Finally. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open. click Training Files. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. select panel LP-2B. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. 2 In the drawing area. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. zoom to space Electrical 220.

■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. Under Electrical-Loads. and Phase C . and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. for Rating. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. B. 1-#12. Phase B 3636 VA. 1-#10. Notice that the loads on Phase A. click Rebalance Loads. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 1-#10. enter 30A. 1-#12. 6 Click OK. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.3616 VA). Click OK.3712 VA. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Scroll down.

The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. for Rating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. under Electrical . Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click Training Files. 17 Close the warning dialog.Loads.rvt.15 Select panel PP-2B. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. under Electrical . 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Next you create a panel schedule. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. and click OK. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. enter 25A.Loads. Select PP-2B. enter 30A. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. for Rating. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.

enter 1/8. Under Header Text.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. and open E601 .Panel Schedules. 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. expand Sheets (all). click Edit. 7 Select the schedule. Under Body Text. click Training Files. select Berlin Sans FB. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. for Font. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. enter 3/32. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Under Header Text. for Appearance. for Font Size. 11 Click OK twice. under Other. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font Size. select Bold and Italic. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 In the Project Browser. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 4 Close the report.

9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. select space Lounge 212. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. each with a load of 180VA. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. press TAB once. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Checking Your Design | 215 .

14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 16 Close the details dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 17 In the drawing area. select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 20 On the Options Bar. for Panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

click Duplicate. planning is critical to a successful design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Training Files. type PVC . and verify that Level 1 . Adding a pipe size. In this lesson.Plumbing Plan . 4 In the Name dialog.Vent. 2 In the Project Browser. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you create a PVC pipe type.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this exercise.Sanitary. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Design is open.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. 219 . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and click Properties. in addition to loading existing families. right-click PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

0''. In the Project Browser. 27 For the new pipe size. select Tee Vent . 10 On the Selection panel.Vent is listed. for Material. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main.DWV. select Plastic. 18 For System Type. 17 In the left pane. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. PVC . select Tee Reducing Double Vent .PVC .Sch 40 . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . Cross. enter 1/2''. for Nominal. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Tee. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. click Training Files. 22 Click New Size. select Sanitary. click Modify. For Offset. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 26 Click OK. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.DWV: Standard.PVC . click Pipe Settings. 21 In the right pane. enter 10°. 6 Click OK. 25 For Outside. and click Main.Sch 40 . 15 For System Type.DWV: Standard. enter 27/32''. 13 In the right panel. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. and click OK. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected.PVC . and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Sanitary. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .rfa. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. select Branch. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. enter -4' . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Mechanical.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Tee.Sch 40 . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Tap. enter 5/8''. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Types. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 24 For Inside Diameter. select None. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.

Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. including plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. add a hot water heater. vent. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and hot and cold water piping. Create the cold water system. 221 . Create the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system.

including the men’s room (space Male 107). you add 2 toilets. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 1 urinal. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room.

6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. in the Type Selector. select Public . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 5 On the Placement panel. 4 On the Element panel.Flush Valve . against the left wall.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.Wall Mounted. as shown.1. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . and 3 sinks. 1 wall-mounted urinal.6 gpf. under Water Closet . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

) 8 Press Esc. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.Wall Hung. under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. use the reference line to center the fixture. and press Esc. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.7 Click to place another toilet. zoom in closer. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. (Again. above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

14 Click Modify.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. select 5''x5'' Strainer . click Place on Face.2'' Drain. In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain .Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and a floor drain. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click in the System Browser table heading. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. a urinal. and click View ➤ Piping. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. In this exercise. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and review the components listed under this system. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 21 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.rvt. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click OK. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 6 In the plan view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design is open.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Plumbing Plan . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Design ➤ Floor Plans.

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. 11 On the Options Bar. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. for System Name. expand Sanitary. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. click Finish Editing System. If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. enter Sanitary 107. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

and click OK. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. A preview of the piping layout displays. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. at the midpoint of the detail lines. select Sanitary 107. as shown. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. select one of the components in the system.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed.

19 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 24 In the left pane. and click Settings. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Main. 26 On the Options Bar. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click OK. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. select Intersections. for Solution Type. select 4''. for Diameter. click Solutions. 23 For Offset. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 On Options Bar. and modify it to meet project requirements. 25 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. 27 Click Modify. The default settings are automatically modified. for Slope. and for Offset. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter 1/8'' / 12''. You accept this suggested solution. enter -4'-0”. for Offset. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Branch. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.30 In the 3D view. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .33 Using the previous method.

select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . as shown.

Design is open.Plumbing Plan . 5 On the Placement panel. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. under Lavatory .Rectangular. and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans.Public. 4 On the Element panel.rvt. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 22''x22'' . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . For example. and press Enter to create a second sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. TIP When entering dimensions. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. 8 Select the sink. On the Options Bar. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. enter 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. select Multiple. without having to enter ' and '' symbols.7 Click Modify.

12 In the drawing area. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 16 On the Edit System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 11 In the System Browser.

right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 22 In the plan view. 19 In the 3D view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the fitting. double-click 3D Plumbing.Design ➤ 3D Views. with the tee fitting selected. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. under Design ➤ Plumbing .In the System Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

and click Apply. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.6''.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 27 Click Modify. and click to draw the pipe. enter 2' . for Offset. In this example. 26 On the Options Bar. for Slope. press Spacebar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. enter 1/8'' / 12''. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 24 On the Options Bar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When you press the Spacebar.

under Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector.PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. select Standard. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays.DWV. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. click to place the fitting. 31 Click Modify.Sch 40 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

for Offset. enter 6''. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. you add pipe segments to the double wye. zoom in to the double wye fitting. right-click the right connector. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter. on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 1'. and click Draw Pipe. 36 In the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. In the next steps.33 With the fitting selected. 34 Press Esc.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . as shown.

46 In the section view. press Spacebar. and press Esc. 49 Using the same method. enter 6''. 48 Click Modify. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a selection box around the left sink to select it.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.

and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 55 In the 3D view.PVC . 53 Using the same method. 54 Click Modify. 52 In the plan view. select the P-Trap on the left. under Trap P . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.Sch 40 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.DWV. 56 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. 51 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. select the left P-Trap. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. Select the double wye pipe on the left. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. Click in the plan view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter.

under Pipe Types. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. and select a proposed solution. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. Press Esc. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.■ In the 3D view. select PVC Sanitary. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl.

You have appropriately sloped the pipe. click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. and verify the slope. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. for Slope.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 62 On the Options Bar.

select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select Standard.Plumbing Plan .DWV. 9 In the Type Selector. 10 In the 3D view. 3 In the Section view.Overall. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and click to draw the pipe. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .Sch 40 .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . as shown. 7 On the Selection panel. and click Draw Pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. right-click the top connector. select the vertical stack. 5 Select the tee. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .PVC . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design.Floor level line. click Modify. and click the intersection to place the fitting. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

13 Click the rotate control once. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter 1'-0”.DWV. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.PVC . as shown. select Standard. 15 Press Esc. for Offset.11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting. 17 In the Type Selector. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 18 In the plan view. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Sch 40 . under Plug . 14 On the Options Bar.

rvt. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Plumbing Plan . The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .19 Click Modify. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.

select Pipe Types: Water. 9 In the left pane.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Overall. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and click OK. urinal. select Branch. For Offset. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Domestic Cold Water. and sinks. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. For Offset. select Pipe Types: Water. select Domestic Hot Water. 17 In the Filter dialog. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing . for System Type. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. select Branch. and for System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views. enter 9' 3''. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. and click Main. double-click 3D Plumbing . (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . expand Unassigned. minimize the Sanitary system. 14 In the System Browser. 6 In the left pane. select Main. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.) 10 Click OK. for System Type. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 15 In the plan view. 7 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 4 In the right pane. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. select Domestic Hot Water. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. if necessary. click Check None. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Plumbing Fixtures. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.

21 On the Edit System panel. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. enter DCW 107. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. For Flow Conversion Method. click Edit System. 19 On the System Tools panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. In the System Browser. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.

35 In the Type Selector. right-click the top DCW connector. for Offset. enter 4'0”. and click the connector. select 3/4''. select the sink above the urinal. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. For Offset. as shown. at the intersection of the water main pipe. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. enter 0”/12”. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. for Offset. 28 In the Type Selector. select Water. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 In the plan view.25 Using the same method. and press Enter. enter 3' .2 7/8''. 33 Click Modify. 36 Move the cursor to the left. enter 7''. For Slope. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and click to place the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. under Pipe Types. and press Enter. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. enter 10'. connect the second toilet. click to the left of the urinal. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 34 In the plan view.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 41 Select the top sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line.

44 Using the same method. add a water heater. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

expand the Unassigned folder. while pressing Ctrl. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select the 3 sinks. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. 5 In the System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .rvt.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 .Overall.

Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 14 Click Modify. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. you edit the system to add equipment. When designing systems. for System Name. under Water Heater . and click OK. Default Domestic Cold Water. In later steps. verify that DCW 107 is selected. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. select 0. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories).6 Gallon. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 In the System Browser. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 13 In the plan view. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. as shown. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.Tankless. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 10 In the System Browser. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. Default Domestic Hot Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. and click Edit System.

right-click the middle left connector. and click the water main line. and press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up. 23 On the Options Bar. for Offset. click Finish Editing System. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and on the Edit System panel. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 22 In the Type Selector. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 1' 6''. 25 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . Slope: 0''/12''. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. and select Draw Pipe. as shown. enter 10’. 27 Click Modify. select the water heater. Offset: 4' 6''. 19 Select the water heater.

31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. enter 1''. select 4'-6''. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. enter 1' 6''. and in the System Selector. click Edit System. for Diameter. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 30 On the System Tools panel. and on the Placement Tools panel. and for Offset. as shown. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. click Finish Editing System. for Offset. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. 38 Move the cursor to the right.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. enter 9' 0''. 35 On the Options Bar. 33 On the Edit System panel. select a sink. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 36 Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. 37 On the Options Bar.

42 Click Modify.39 Move the cursor down. 41 Move the cursor down. for Offset. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . enter 1’. and click just above the bottom sink. enter 2' 8''. as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.

connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However. 267 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You create a new pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. If the tutorial training files are not present. and click Duplicate.rvt. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.autodesk. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. 2 Right-click Standard. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. After finishing each exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. In this lesson. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. click Training Files.

10 Close the file with or without saving it. and enter Fire Protection Wet. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 6 In the Project Browser. duct. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. verify that 9' 0" is specified. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. select Carbon Steel. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. Next. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For Offset. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK. select Main. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. click Rename. For System Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. under Mechanical. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Pipe Type. For Pipe Type. and click Properties. or architectural components. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. In this exercise. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. structural beams. you create project parameters and work with schedules.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Fire Protection Wet. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you modify the type properties of the pipe. for Material. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 9 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For Offset. However. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. In the left pane. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping.

Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. under Fire Protection. For Group parameter under. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. the space crossing lines display. enter Zone 1. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the drawing area. select space Instruction 221 as shown. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Spaces.rvt. and then click OK. for Name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. right-click.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. for Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the upper half of the building. enter Sprinkler Zone. and click Element Properties. 5 Click OK twice. select Fire Protection. 8 Using a crossing window.Design is highlighted. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Under Categories.Fire Protection Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

enter Zone 2. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. and then access instance properties. verify that only Spaces are selected. to which you add various parameters. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. under Fire Protection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog. for Sprinkler Zone. 13 Using the same method. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK.

Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter 15. double-click on each column separator. and on the ribbon. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Key name. enter Maximum Spacing. 14 Select the new header. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 6 Using the same method. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design is highlighted. select Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. select Feet and fractional inches. In the Maximum Spacing column. select Fire Protection. enter Light. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Select Schedule keys. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Format dialog. For Group parameter under. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 Click OK twice. The schedule displays. for Name. and click Field Format. For Units. 7 Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Fire Protection Plan . For Type of Parameter. Click OK. For Rounding.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Maximum Spacing. For Name. click Add Parameter. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. select To the nearest 1'. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.

Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Unobstructed Extra. enter Sprinkler Schedule. under Available fields. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 16 Using the same method. and press Enter. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter 130. Click OK. select Spaces. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Ordinary.

This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. click . select Fixed. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. 22 Click OK twice. For Rounding. Select Header and Blank line.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. and click Field Format. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. enter Minimum Sprinklers. 19 Click the Formatting tab. and click View Properties. select Common. for Sort by. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Discipline. select 0 decimal place. for Sorting/Grouping. under Other. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. In the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 20 On the Formatting tab. For Then by. click Edit. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. For Formula. select Number. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Units. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. select Area. Enter the formula operator / after Area.

The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Sprinkler Zone. At the bottom of the dialog. select Grand totals. and then select Hidden field. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. 30 Click OK twice. select Minimum Sprinklers. click Edit. select Number. and click View Properties.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. Under Field formatting. For Then by (second instance). On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and then click Field Format. for Filter by. select Level. verify that Use default settings is selected. For Fields. 27 In the drawing area. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Level equals Level 2. select Hidden field. for Filter. ■ In the Format dialog.

■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Embedded Schedule. click Edit. and click View Properties. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Under Field formatting. For Category. On the Formatting tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and Count. select Grand totals. and select Totals only. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Calculate totals. select Embedded Schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. delete the word Maximum. select Sprinklers.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. under Other. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. System Name. for Available fields. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. for Fields. double-click Type.

48 In the floor plan. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . but their values are not determined. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 52 Click OK. for Protection Area Construction Type. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. double-click FP . 44 In the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 46 With the space still selected. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 41 In the plan view. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and access the instance properties. Unobstructed. select Light. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. and click OK. under Identity Data. 43 Click Cancel.Fire Protection Plan Design. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. As a result. 50 Access the instance properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. go to http://www. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. However. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. 279 . At the end of this tutorial.rvt. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. After finishing each exercise.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. As you create the system.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. click Training Files. and double-click Level 2 . If the tutorial training files are not present.autodesk.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. By following the recommended workflow. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . methodology. you will understand the process. As you place the sprinklers. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.

6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 3 In the Project Browser. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. After placing the initial sprinkler. When this happens.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.

while pressing Ctrl. 9 In space Instruction 202. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. 10 Press Esc twice. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and select Sprinkler . select the sprinklers that you placed. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Pendent . as shown. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area. Adding Sprinklers | 281 .

the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. as shown. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 On the Options Bar. Next. and then press Esc.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.

specify a vertical offset.Fire Protection Plan . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. enter 14' 6". 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Click OK. Next. you adjust the offset. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 22 In the 200A Corridor space. open Design ➤ FP . you place non-hosted sprinklers. For Number. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 19 In the floor plan. move the cursor to the right. 18 Type WT. and click Element Properties. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. under Constraints. Notice that the schedule updates. and 200C). 200B. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 17 In the Project Browser. for Offset. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". Adding Sprinklers | 283 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This number is determined in the schedule. enter 11. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 29 Press Esc. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. enter 10' 6". and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and press Enter. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.FP_Ceiling view.Design.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the next exercise. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. After creating the logical connection. indicating that it’s the active view. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.30 Close the file with or without saving it. However. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping.Design is highlighted. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. and with piping (physical connection). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure.rvt. Unlike logical connections (systems). A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. click Training Files. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.

4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. As you assign sprinklers to systems. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. as shown. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. named Fire Protection Wet. In the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 . click View ➤ Systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.

indicating the logical connection. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. In the left pane. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select an initial piping layout. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 19 Click OK. select Branch. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. click Settings. enter FP Wet_Zone2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. For Offset. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and on the Options Bar. and select the system. 13 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. and a piping layout preview displays. press Tab. and click Select.Wet is selected.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 15 In the drawing area. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. place the cursor over a sprinkler. verify that Main is selected. providing system editing tools. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and number of elements in the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . For Pipe Type. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Edit Piping System panel displays. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. for System Name. Next. verify that 9' 0" is specified. system equipment.

click Place Base. for Diameter. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 22 On the Options Bar. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). and select solution 5.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset. click Solutions. verify that Network is selected. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. and green represents branch lines). When the layout is finished. as shown. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. enter -12' 0". The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. In general. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. select 2".

29 Click Finish Layout. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. as shown. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. On the Generate Layout panel. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.

or that offset elevations are incorrect. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. the Connect Into tool. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and then you create piping to physically connect them. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. and various manual pipe creation tools. 32 If necessary.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Next. or manually modify the pipe. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.

rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . 3 If necessary.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). verify that Solutions is selected. or a system component to display system tools. and pipe or duct is created. 18 Click Finish Editing System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you can select the pipe or duct. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 9 On the Edit System panel. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 Close the System Browser. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 12 On the Options Bar. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). click Finish Editing System. verify that Network is selected. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 8 In the corridor. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. radiators.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. mechanical equipment. for Solution Type. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and select solution 5. click Add To System. air terminals. 5 In the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Layout. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar.

28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. right-click. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. select 9'. for Offset. 24 In the Piping Plan.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 29 Using the same method. 21 In the Piping Plan. and click Draw Pipe.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and then tile the views. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 27 On the Options Bar. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. double-click on the section head to open the section view. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 4 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . ■ 6 Press Esc.Design is highlighted. for Scale. select 1/4" = 1'-0". indicating that it’s the active view. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4". 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar.

26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 25 On the Options Bar. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . The pipe diameter is modified.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 1 1/4". 24 In the drawing area. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. and then tag the piping as shown. as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for Diameter.

you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this tutorial. For additional practice. In this exercise. You added tags to pipes. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you created a wet fire protection system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. dependent views. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. 307 . matchlines. and view references. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.rvt. and click Rename. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Properties. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and apply a view template. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. If the view included detail graphics.

Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. views and put them on the sheet. 10 In the drawing area.rvt. and click Apply Default View Template. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click OK. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 4 Using the same method. and then press Esc. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. click Training Files. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 9 Click OK.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. more focused. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Rename. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.

21 Using the same method. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Double Dash 5/8". for Target view. 20 Select the upper view reference and. select 11. For Line Pattern. select black.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 19 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc twice. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . 14 Click Finish Matchline./ ---). and then press Esc. For Line Weight. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. Click OK. on the Options Bar. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. In the Color dialog. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. click the current value.

and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 25 Using the same method.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and zoom to each of the view references. 27 Using the same method. as shown.

select Documentation. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Under Graphics. and click Properties. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. The section crop lines no longer display. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.29 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.Domestic Water.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.Domestic Water. For Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. select Plumbing. for View Name. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Plumbing Isometric . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 2 Zoom in. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click 3D Plumbing. select Plumbing Isometric. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for View Classification. and click to select it. Click OK. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. click Training Files. and select the section box. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Apply Default View Template. enter Plumbing Isometric .

select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. Click Apply. For Pattern. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 12 Using the same method. select 3. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. and then click OK. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16".9 Right-click. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click to select it.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 14 Right-click.

On the View Control Bar. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.Domestic Water view with detailing. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. 18 Using methods learned previously. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. In the drawing area.Sanitary Waste. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements.15 Press Esc. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Right-click. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.

you use a plan view to create a callout view. select To the nearest 1/8". 21 Click OK twice. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. verify that Common is selected. 25 Press Esc twice. In the Format dialog. and then place the callout view on a sheet. as shown. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. For Slope.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. and click to place the spot slope annotation. When the view is associated with a sheet. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. for Rounding. Creating Callout Views | 315 . Creating Callout Views In this exercise. click on the Format value.

Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. click Training Files. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). select 1/4"=1'-0''. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar.

double-click M601 . Creating Callout Views | 317 . for Line Weight. select 5. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. drag it to the sheet. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Sheets (all). 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. using the same method. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.

for View Name. Click OK. right-click the callout view. and select the viewport.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. For Default View Template.

20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

enter Typical WSHP Detail. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. under Names. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click OK. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Rename. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the detail view. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click Apply View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

and annotation to create a legend. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. 321 . ■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. linetypes. symbols.

Creating Annotations In this exercise. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. click Training Files. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 8 With the text still selected. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan.

11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. and then click Right Straight. 15 On the Options Bar. a return diffuser.9 Press Esc twice. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a segment of round duct. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 323 . verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct. as shown. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection.

clear Leader. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . tag the remaining diffusers in the area. under Category. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 24 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Tags dialog. and click Open. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. for Ducts. and click OK. 21 In the Load Family dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. If necessary. click Load. 17 Click Modify. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 22 In the Tags dialog.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select Horizontal. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 26 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Creating Annotations | 325 . 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.25 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. Leader. as shown. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 31 On the Options Bar.

33 On the Options Bar. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End. as shown. for Leader. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

39 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the drawing area. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and lock lighting fixtures. not simply an instance property. lay out. 40 Using the method learned previously. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. select the last tag placed. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and all elements of that type are affected. That’s because you changed a type property. and click OK.36 Press Esc twice. select Dot Open 1/16". Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions | 327 . you use temporary dimensions to locate. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Press Esc. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. indicating that it’s the active view. and then select the interior face of the wall. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. On the Options Bar. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. select the dimension line. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.

16 Press Esc. and notes. enter 8'. and offset them 8' from the wall. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. and press Enter. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Because the dimensions are locked.13 Using the same method. linework. Creating a Legend | 329 . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Creating a Legend In this exercise. 19 Using the same methods.3 1/2"). the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. click the 3 interior locks on the line. annotation symbols.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. click Training Files. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. select Floor Plan. enter Diffuser Legend. For View. 5 Click in the drawing area. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . ■ 9 In the drawing area.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rvt. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 10 Using the same method. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select 1/4" = 1' -0".8 Neck.

click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

22 Zoom in to the copied component.DROP and its text note. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The selected detail lines are now thin. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.RISE symbol for the copy start point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 21 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 26 Press Esc. and then press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.30 Select Spot Elevation . in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. enter E. and then click Modify. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. Creating a Legend | 333 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Modify. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 .

39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. and text. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. detail groups. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A drafting view using detail components. 335 .113 East elevation view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A detail callout that references another view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.

113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . place Power Riser . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. and then modify and align the views. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. and click to place it. Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 8 Using the same method.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser . select each of the 2 panelboards. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Activate View. right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . for Title on Sheet. and click OK. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Press Esc. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. select the 113 North view. 13 Right-click. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. giving the appearance of a single view. under Identity Data.

You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. as shown. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. 22 Press Esc. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. and click Activate View. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. 21 Using the drag control. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Line Weight.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. select 6. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.113 North view. 9 Beginning at the transformer. notice that there are no snaps active.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. for Name. In the Line Styles dialog. Under Modify Subcategories. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . expand Lines. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . 8 On the Options Bar. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. In the New Subcategory dialog. 2 Close the Project Browser. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Electrical Power. verify that Chain is selected. As you draw.rvt. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click Training Files. as shown. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. click New.

13 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard.10 Press Esc.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 29 Click Modify. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 28 Click above the cap.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.

40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol.5. enter 3/32". and then press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter.36 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 0 0. for Offset.

for Name. and then press Esc. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. Using the same method. enter Ground. and press Enter. while pressing Ctrl. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. enter 0 0. select all 3 lines.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. you can ensure that they stay together. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. expand Groups ➤ Detail.25. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. 50 With the group selected. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 47 In the drawing area.125. click on the length dimension value. 46 In the Project Browser.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 54 Select the group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. 52 Select the detail group. TP-2B. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. for Name. and will place it on sheet E01. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 5 Zoom in to view the section. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Right-click the copy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Rename. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. and click OK. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.

and then press Esc. and then click the corner where the Top. 7 On the ViewCube. Back. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge.

right-click. Click OK. and click Apply View Template. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select 3D HVAC Iso. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Walkthroughs. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. select 3D Views. Under Names. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Typical. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. as shown.

select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.To rotate and reposition a text label. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and then click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. under Extents. 23 Click on the crop region. 25 Click OK. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. and under Extents.

select the isometric view. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. select 3" = 1'-0". For Scale. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy.rvt. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click Properties. 3 In the Project Browser. right-click the view name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i.29 In the drawing area. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . click Training Files. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification.

select Documentation. as shown. for Sub-Discipline. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 12 On the Element panel. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Click OK. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 9 Zoom in to the component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Plumbing. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. click the point at the top of the drain.

for Type. 23 In the drawing area. (Line). Concrete. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.I. and then press Esc. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.P. 22 Click Modify. select C. 21 In the drawing area. 18 With the filled region still selected.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. select the filled region. 20 Select 1. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. select Multiple. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. and then click to select them. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc.28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew.

44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . as shown. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then select the side of the slab above the line. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 45 Using the method learned previously. (Rectangle).38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out.

and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain.D. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. and click OK. draw wide detail lines as shown. 49 Click Modify. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. select the Flashing Membrane group. for Name. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog.

57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 71 Click Modify. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 64 Press Esc twice. 72 If necessary. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.

75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 80 Press Esc twice. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to specify the second leader point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.

select the view title. and click to place it. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. open P103 . Drafting Detail Components | 363 .85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc twice.

for Line Weight.dwg. For Layers. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For A-----NPP. Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click Open. select Black and White. For Colors. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. click Training Files. select Auto-Detect. select Visible. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. select 3. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.rvt. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. you import a CAD detail drawing. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. For Import units. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the viewport title. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 12 In the drawing area. 11 Press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.8 Type ZF. open P103 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful